Changes

Line 16: Line 16:     
=== Series Authority Records ===
 
=== Series Authority Records ===
 +
<!--<span style="color:red">''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.</span>-->
    +
[2021-11-03] <!--(2021-10-27)-->
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]]
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]]
   Line 81: Line 83:  
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:
 
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
États-Unis. Président (1789-1979 : Washington)
+
États-Unis. Président (1789-<span style="color:red>1797</span> : Washington)
 
</div>
 
</div>
 
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:
 
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:
Line 108: Line 110:  
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.
 
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.
   −
[2021-03-02]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
[2023-05-08]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   Line 114: Line 116:  
=== General ===  
 
=== General ===  
   −
When creating an NAR for a family name, assign value “n” in 008/32.
+
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.
   −
As LC and the PCC, PFAN has agreed to the following guidelines for persons whose preferred names are identical:
+
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:
* Do not use code “b” in an RDA name authority record; all personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.
+
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.
 
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”
 
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”
 +
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.
   −
Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.
+
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===
 +
 
 +
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded "b") from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it. Create a new authority record for the entity.<br> 
 +
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.<br>
 +
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.
   −
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===
     −
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person’s relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.
+
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.
    
''Example:''<br>
 
''Example:''<br>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = b
 
008/32 = b
 +
 
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard
 
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard
 +
 
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]
 
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]
 +
 
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
 
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
 +
 
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]
 
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]
 +
 
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
 
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
 +
 
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]
 
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]
 +
 
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
 
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)
</pre>
+
</div>
    
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.
 
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.
Line 151: Line 164:  
</div>
 
</div>
   −
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated name record:
+
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see "[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]" below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note "CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN", use that notice as the "new record".
+
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see "[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]" below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note "CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN" and coded "a" in field 008/32, use that notice as the "new record".
 
* Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.
 
* Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.
 
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note "CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN".
 
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note "CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN".
Line 164: Line 177:  
<ul>
 
<ul>
 
<li>
 
<li>
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN »), use that notice as the "new record".  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:
+
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded "a" in field 008/32, use that notice as the "new record".  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:
 
<ul>
 
<ul>
 
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">
 
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">
Line 171: Line 184:  
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">
 
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">
 
Add a 667 note:
 
Add a 667 note:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
</pre>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''</div>
 +
</div>
 
</li>
 
</li>
   
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.</li>
 
<li style="list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;">Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.</li>
 
</ul>
 
</ul>
 +
 
</li>
 
</li>
   Line 191: Line 205:     
</div>
 
</div>
 +
 
</li>
 
</li>
   −
<li>PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:bac.pfansuppression-deletionfnap.lac@canada.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D bac.pfansuppression-deletionfnap.lac@canada.ca].<br>
+
<li>PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].<br>
 
Suggested generic message:
 
Suggested generic message:
 
<div style="padding-left:50px; width:500px;">
 
<div style="padding-left:50px; width:500px;">
Line 213: Line 228:  
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:
   −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = b
 
008/32 = b
 +
 
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]
 
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]
 +
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 +
 
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.
 
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.
 +
 
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)
 
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)
</pre>
+
</div>
 
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:
 
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = a
 
008/32 = a
 +
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 +
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-
 +
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
 
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)
 
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 : $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, $d 1920-)
+
 
</pre>
+
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)
 +
</div>
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = b
 
008/32 = b
 +
 
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]
 
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]
 +
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 +
 
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
</pre>
+
</div>
 
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:
 
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = a
 
008/32 = a
 +
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]
 +
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 
100 1# $a Dupont, André
 +
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
 
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)
 
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)
</pre>
+
</div>
    
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''
 
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''
    
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = b
 
008/32 = b
 +
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 +
 
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN
 
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN
 +
 
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]
 
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]
 +
 
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)
 
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)
 +
 
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]
 
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]
 +
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)
</pre>
+
</div>
 
New record for the author of Esperanza:
 
New record for the author of Esperanza:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = a
 
008/32 = a
 +
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 +
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle
 +
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
 
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)
 
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)
</pre>
+
</div>
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:
 
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
008/32 = b
 
008/32 = b
 +
 +
016 ## $a 0000X0000F
 +
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 +
 
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)
</pre>
+
</div>
 
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :
 
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
008/32 = a
+
008red/32 = a
 +
 
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
 +
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne
 +
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)
 
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)
</pre>
+
</div>
    
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===
 
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===
    
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:
 
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
</pre>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''</div>
 +
</div>
 +
<br>
   −
[2021-03-16]<!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity.  
   −
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==
+
''Example:''<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
008/32 = b
   −
'''NARS'''
+
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
  −
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:
     −
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
+
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)
'''General'''<br>
     −
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.</div>
+
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)
 +
</div>
   −
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''<br>
+
<span style="color:red>It may also happen that we suspect that the value "b" has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed</span> as follows:
   −
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.</div>
+
<ul><li>Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. </li>
   −
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''<br>
+
<li>Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note " CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN " and coded "a" in field 008/32, use that notice as the "new record".</li>
 +
<li>Add a 667 note:
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''</div></li>
   −
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:<br>
+
<li>Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.</li>
<ol>
+
<li>Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 " CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ".</li>
<li>If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.<br>
  −
<li>
  −
<li>If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.<li>
  −
</ol>
  −
</div>
  −
</div>
     −
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
+
<li>PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].<br>
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:<br>
+
Suggested generic message:
 
+
<div style="padding-left:50px; width:500px;">
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.</div>
+
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer<br>
 
+
<br>
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.</div>
+
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.<br>
</div>
+
Notice à conserver :<br>
 +
Notice à conserver :<br>
 +
Notice à supprimer :  <br>
 
</div>
 
</div>
 +
</div>
   −
'''SARs'''
+
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. 
 +
</ul>
 +
<br>
 +
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
are optional.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:</div>
   −
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.
+
008/32 = b
   −
[2021-02-28]<!--(2021-02-26)-->
+
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==
+
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.
   −
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.
+
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)
<!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). -->
+
</div>
   −
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :</div>
   −
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =
+
008/32 = b
   −
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record.
+
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire
   −
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter).  
+
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.
   −
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field. 
+
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN
   −
'''Duplicates'''
+
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.
   −
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person’s name has changed).
+
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)
 +
</div>
   −
<ol>'''PFAN'''
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
<br>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">New authority record after disambiguation</div>
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.<br>
+
 
 +
008/32 = a
 +
 
 +
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]
   −
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.<br>
+
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire
   −
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.
+
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.<br>
     −
<br>
+
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)
______<br>
     −
'''LAC'''<br>
+
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)
   −
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. <br>
+
[...]
   −
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.</ol>
+
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)
 +
</div></span>
   −
[2021-03-02]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
[2023-10-26]<!--(2023-10-26)-->
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =
+
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
'''NARS'''
 +
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
 +
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:
    +
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
 
'''General'''<br>
 
'''General'''<br>
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.
     −
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:
+
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.</div>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ
     −
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ
+
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''<br>
</div>
     −
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.
+
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.</div>
   −
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).
+
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''<br>
   −
[2021-03-09] <!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:<br>
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
<ol>
 +
<li>If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.<br>
 +
<li>
 +
<li>If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.<li>
 +
</ol>
 +
</div>
 +
</div>
   −
= 024 Other standard identifier =
+
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
'''General'''<br>
+
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:<br>
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.
     −
'''Maintenance'''<br>
+
<div style="margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;">
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.
+
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.</div>
   −
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
+
<div style="margin-bottom:25px;">As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.</div>
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
</div>
 +
</div>
 +
<!--'''SARs'''
   −
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =
+
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records
 +
are optional.
   −
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''<br>
+
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.-->
 +
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-10-27)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The
+
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to
  −
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.
     −
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).
+
<!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.-->
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000
+
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.
</div>
+
<!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). -->
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532
+
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-10-20)-->
</div>
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example with +/-)''</div>
     −
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532<br>
+
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record.  
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example without the optional plus sign)''</div>
  −
</div>
     −
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)
+
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point. If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter).  
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704
  −
</div>
  −
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
'''Duplicates'''
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125
  −
</div>
      +
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed).
   −
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''<br>
+
<ol>'''PFAN'''
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded
+
<br>
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).
+
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.<br>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.<br>
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''</div>
     −
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833<br>
+
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.  
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing decimal degrees)''</div>
+
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.<br>
   −
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833<br>
+
<br>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''</div>
+
______<br>
</div>
     −
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''<br>
+
'''LAC'''<br>
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other; here are two examples:
     −
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds to Decimal degrees:'''<br>
+
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. <br>
:http://vancouver-webpages.com/META/DMS.html
     −
:'''Decimal degrees to Degrees/minutes/seconds:'''<br>
+
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.</ol>
:http://vancouver-webpages.com/META/DD.html
        −
'''Sources'''<br>
+
<span style="color:red>'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''</span>
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].
     −
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.
+
<span style="color:red>Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. </span>
   −
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
+
[2022-01-26]<!--(2022-01-26)-->
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 035 System Control Number =
+
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.-->
 +
'''General'''<br>
 +
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.
   −
= 040 Cataloging source =
+
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:
 
+
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ
   −
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''<br>
+
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.
+
</div>
   −
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''<br>
+
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution’s is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field.
  −
  −
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''<br>
  −
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code "z" in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.
     −
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).
+
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-15)-->
+
[2021-11-03] <!--(2021-11-02)-->
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 042 Authentication Code =
+
= 024 Other standard identifier =
 +
'''General'''<br>
 +
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.
   −
'''PFAN'''<br>This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.
+
'''Maintenance'''<br>
 +
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.
   −
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field. 
+
[2021-11-01]<!--(2021-11-01)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
_____
+
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =
   −
'''LAC'''<br>In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana).
+
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''<br>
   −
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-08)-->
+
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to
 +
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.
   −
= 046 Special coded dates =
+
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).
'''General'''
     −
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). When revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available.  
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000
 +
</div>
 +
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)
   −
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3].  
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532
 +
</div>
 +
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)
   −
''Examples:''
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532<br>
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example with +/-)''</div>
   −
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962
+
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example without the optional plus sign)''</div>
 +
</div>
   −
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))
+
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)
   −
670 ## $a Wikipédia, consultée le 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704
 +
</div>
 +
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)
   −
<div style="margin-top:25px;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf
+
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125
 
  −
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.
  −
 
  −
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
<div style="margin-top:25px;">
  −
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf
     −
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-
+
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''<br>
 +
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded
 +
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).
   −
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
</div>
+
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''</div>
   −
<div style="margin-top:25px;">
+
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833<br>
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing decimal degrees)''</div>
   −
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus
+
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833<br>
 
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;">''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''</div>
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)
  −
</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699).
+
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''<br>
 +
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other; here are two examples:
   −
''Example:''  
+
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds to Decimal degrees:'''<br>
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
:http://vancouver-webpages.com/META/DMS.html
046 ## $s 17
     −
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle
+
:'''Decimal degrees to Degrees/minutes/seconds:'''<br>
 +
:http://vancouver-webpages.com/META/DD.html
   −
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle)
  −
</div>
     −
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphenminus before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active
+
'''Sources'''<br>
approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field.  
+
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].
   −
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''
+
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.
   −
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century.
+
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
'''Subfield $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''
+
= 035 System Control Number =
   −
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
= 040 Cataloging source =
   −
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670:
+
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.
<ol>
  −
<li>670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.</li>
     −
<li>For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:
+
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''<br>
<ol>
+
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.
<li type="a">use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670</li>
     −
<li type="a">use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670</li>
+
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''<br>
 +
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field.
 +
 +
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''<br>
 +
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code "z" in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.
   −
<li type="a">use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v</li>
+
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).
</li>
  −
</ol>
  −
</li>
  −
</ol>
  −
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently.  
     −
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-15)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).
+
= 042 Authentication Code =
  −
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited.
     −
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found).  
+
'''PFAN'''<br>This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.
   −
'''For tangibles sources:'''
+
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field. 
   −
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog
+
_____
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator’s name
     −
'''For online resources:'''
+
'''LAC'''<br>In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana).
   −
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the
+
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-08)-->
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u.
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
''Example:''
+
= 043 Geographic Area Code <span style="color:red>[New]</span>=
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.
     −
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html
+
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).
   −
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)
+
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''
</div>
     −
[2021-02-19]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code "n-cn---" and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the "n-cn---" code (e.g., "n-cn---"). (e.g. "n-cn-qa"). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =
+
''Example :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)
 +
</div>
   −
= 053 LC classification number =
     −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''
 +
{| class="wikitable sortable mw-collapsible" style="background:none; width:40%"
 +
|+
 +
! style="background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%" |
 +
! style="background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%" |
 +
! style="background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%" |
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qa
 +
|Bas-Saint-Laurent
 +
|Région 01
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qb
 +
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean
 +
|Région 02
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qc
 +
|Capitale-Nationale
 +
|Région 03
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qd
 +
|Mauricie
 +
|Région 04
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qe
 +
|Estrie
 +
|Région 05
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qf
 +
|Montréal
 +
|Région 06
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qg
 +
|Outaouais
 +
|Région 07
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qh
 +
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue
 +
|Région 08
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qj
 +
|Côte-Nord
 +
|Région 09
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qk
 +
|Nord-du-Québec
 +
|Région 10
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-ql
 +
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine
 +
|Région 11
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qm
 +
|Chaudière-Appalaches
 +
|Région 12
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qn
 +
|Laval
 +
|Région 13
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qo
 +
|Lanaudière
 +
|Région 14
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qp
 +
|Laurentides
 +
|Région 15
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qq
 +
|Montérégie
 +
|Région 16
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|n-cn-qr
 +
|Centre-du-Québec
 +
|Région 17
 +
|- style="vertical-align: top;"
 +
|}
   −
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =
+
[2023-11-20]
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
= 046 Special coded dates =
 +
'''General'''
   −
= 065 Other Classification Number =
+
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d).
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<span id="046_2nd_par">When</span> revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available.
   −
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =
+
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. <span style="color:red> For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].</span>
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf
   −
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =
+
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))
   −
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =
+
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<div style="margin-top:25px;">
 +
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf
   −
= 086 Government Document Call Number =
+
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)
 +
</div>
   −
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =
+
<div style="margin-top:25px;">
 +
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus
   −
= 1XX Headings - General Information =
+
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="margin-top:25px;"><span style="color:red>
 +
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf
   −
'''General'''
+
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)
   −
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.
+
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)
   −
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging
+
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).
+
</div></span>
 +
</div>
   −
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.
+
<span style="color:red>When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.</span>
   −
'''SARs'''
+
<span style="color:red>''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
 +
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf
   −
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.
   −
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].
+
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)
 +
</div></span>
    +
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699).
   −
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''
+
''Example:''  
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
046 ## $s 17
   −
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].
+
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle
#
  −
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].
  −
#
  −
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].
  −
#
  −
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].
      +
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle)
 +
</div>
   −
''Establishing an SAR access point:''
+
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen <span style="color:red>(</span>minus <span style="color:red>sign)</span> before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field.
   −
<ol><li>Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.</li>
+
<span style="color:red>'''Repeatability:'''</span>
   −
<li>Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:
+
<span style="color:red>Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.</span>
<ol>
  −
<li type="a">initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;</li>
     −
<li type="a">other title information;</li>
+
<span style="color:red>'''Conflicting dates'''</span>
   −
<li type="a">statement of responsibility;</li>
+
<span style="color:red>In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.</span>
   −
<li type="a">parallel title(s);</li>
+
<span style="color:red>Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.</span>
   −
<li type="a">ISSN;</li>
+
<span style="color:red>''Example:''
   −
<li type="a">numeric/chronological designations.</li>
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
</ol>
  −
</li>
     −
<li>Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.</li>
+
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf
</ol>
     −
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].
+
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.
   −
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =
+
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))
   −
'''''Authorized access points for families'''
+
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)
'''''General'''
     −
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.
+
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))
   −
'''Subfield instructions'''
+
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''</div>
   −
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:
     −
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.
  −
#
  −
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.
  −
#
  −
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.
  −
#
  −
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.
  −
#
  −
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.
  −
#
  −
''Example:''
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)
  −
</pre>
      +
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf
   −
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''
+
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003
   −
'''General'''
+
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)
   −
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.
+
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film & television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)
   −
'''Subfield instructions'''
+
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)
   −
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:
+
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)
   −
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.
+
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''</div>
   −
<ol>'''Example:'''
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)
  −
</pre></ol>
     −
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)
     −
<ol>''Example:''
+
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979
  −
</pre>
     −
BUT
+
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003<br>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.
+
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' </div>
</pre></ol>
+
</div>
   −
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].
+
<span style="color:red>Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.</span>
   −
[2021-02-19]<!--(2020-12-08)-->
+
<span style="color:red>'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 336 Content Type =
+
<span style="color:red>In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.</span>
   −
'''General'''
+
<span style="color:red>If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.</span>
   −
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.
+
<span style="color:red>''Examples :''
   −
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
   −
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.”
+
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf
   −
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''
+
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994
   −
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].
+
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))
   −
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''
+
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''</div>
 +
</div>
   −
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].
+
<span style="color:red>If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. </span>
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-15)-->
+
<span style="color:red>''Examples :''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
   −
'''General'''
+
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf
   −
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.
+
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-
   −
''Examples:''
+
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)
   −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])<br>
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm
+
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''</div>
 +
</div>
   −
151 ## $a France
+
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''
368 ## $b États $2 ram
     −
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)
+
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century.
368 ## $b Powiat
     −
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431
+
'''<span style="color:red>Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,</span> $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd
     −
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)
+
<span style="color:red>Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien
+
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.</span>
   −
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites)
+
''<span style="color:red>Example :''
368 ## $c Rigdonites 
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
 +
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf
   −
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)
+
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm
  −
368 ## $c BB-50
  −
</pre>
     −
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]].
+
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017
 +
</div>
   −
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.
     −
''Examples:''
+
<span style="color:red>Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.</span>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503
  −
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503
     −
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537
+
''<span style="color:red>Example :''
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;"><span style="color:red>
 +
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf
   −
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013
+
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès
368 ## $d sœur
     −
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860
+
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)
368 ## $d vicomte
  −
</pre>
     −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)</span>
 +
</div>
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.  
   −
''Example:''
+
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd
     −
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov
+
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670:
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
+
<ol>
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' </div>
+
<li>670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.</li>
</div>
     −
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
<li>For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:
 +
<ol>
 +
<li type="a">use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670</li>
   −
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field
+
<li type="a">use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670</li>
   −
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
<li type="a">use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v</li>
   −
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field
+
</ol>
 
+
</li>
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
</ol>
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently.
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''
   −
= 370 Associated place =
+
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).
 +
 +
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited.
   −
'''General'''
+
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found).
   −
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.
+
'''For tangibles sources:'''
   −
''Examples:''
+
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
  −
151 ## $a Washington (État)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''</div><br>
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
+
'''For online resources:'''
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
+
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u.  
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div><br>
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
''Example:''
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)
+
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div>
  −
</div><br>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
  −
151 ## $a Québec (Province)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''</div>
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Authorized access point recorded in 370: </div>
  −
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
  −
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec)
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
+
</div>
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)
  −
</div><br>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Geographic name in Canadiana : </div>
  −
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''</div>
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
  −
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
[2023-10-05]<!--(2023-10-03)-->
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)
+
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of place)''</div>
+
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =
<br>
+
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
+
 
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)
+
= 053 LC classification number <span style="color:red>[New]</span>=
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name for the larger place)''</div>
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
  −
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
  −
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''</div>
  −
</div> <br>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
  −
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div>
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
  −
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
''Examples:''
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''</div>
  −
</div><br>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
  −
Other place name in Canadiana :</div>
  −
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
+
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
  −
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf
  −
</div><br>
  −
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.
     −
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without
+
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. <br>
giving a subfield $2.
     −
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].
  −
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.
     −
'''Repeatability:'''
     −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary
+
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
     −
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975
 +
</div>
   −
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.
 
  −
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
     −
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
[2023-10-05]
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
'''SARs'''
+
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
= 065 Other Classification Number <span style="color:red>[New]</span>=
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 371 Address =
+
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.
   −
'''General'''
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
Best practice:
+
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]
* Supply based on cataloger’s judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).
+
</div>
*
  −
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).
  −
*
  −
* Do not record physical addresses for living people.
  −
*
  −
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.
  −
*
     −
'''Repeatability'''
+
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''
   −
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.
+
In subfield $2, record "&nbsp;fcps&nbsp;" to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.
   −
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''
+
[2023-10-05]
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.
+
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =
   −
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =
   −
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 372 Field of activity =
+
= 086 Government Document Call Number =
   −
'''General'''
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a
+
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =
   −
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
''Example:''
+
= 1XX Headings - General Information =
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm
  −
</pre>
     −
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.
+
'''General'''
   −
''Example:''
+
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.
   −
Authorized access point in Canadiana:
+
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament
  −
</pre>
  −
Field of activity in 372:
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf
  −
</pre>
     −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall
+
<!--'''SARs'''
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
     −
''Example:''
+
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm
     −
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale
+
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')</div>
  −
</div>
  −
  −
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
     −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
     −
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.  
+
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].
 
+
#
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
#
 +
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].
 +
#
 +
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].
   −
= 373 Associated group =
  −
'''General'''
     −
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.
+
''Establishing an SAR access point:''
   −
''Examples:''
+
<ol><li>Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.</li>
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Corporate name in Canadiana:</div>
  −
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Authorized access point in 373:</div>
+
<li>Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf
+
<ol>
</div>
+
<li type="a">initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;</li>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
<li type="a">other title information;</li>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Corporate name in Canadiana:</div>
  −
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche
     −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Authorized access point in 373:</div>
+
<li type="a">statement of responsibility;</li>
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf
  −
</div>
     −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
<li type="a">parallel title(s);</li>
   −
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
<li type="a">ISSN;</li>
   −
''Examples:''
+
<li type="a">numeric/chronological designations.</li>
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
</ol>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:</div>
+
</li>
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009
     −
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011
+
<li>Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.</li>
 +
</ol>
   −
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014
+
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].-->
</div>
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-10-27)-->
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:</div>
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf
     −
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf
+
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =
</div>
     −
<span id="373$s$t"></span>
+
'''''Authorized access points for families'''
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
'''''General'''
   −
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is
+
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.
     −
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
'''Subfield instructions'''
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
#
 
+
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.
= 374 Occupation =
+
#
'''General'''
+
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.
 +
#
 +
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.
 +
#
 +
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.
 +
#  
 +
''Example:''  
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)
 +
</div>
   −
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled
  −
vocabulary, use a singular form.
     −
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.
+
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''
   −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
'''General'''
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.
   −
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''
+
'''Subfield instructions'''  
   −
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.
+
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:
   −
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
<ol>'''Example:'''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)
 +
</div></ol>
   −
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
+
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
<ol>''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979
 +
</div>
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
BUT
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.
 +
</div></ol>
   −
= 375 Gender =
+
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].
'''PFAN'''
     −
'''General'''
+
[2021-02-19]<!--(2020-12-08)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
When recording a term indicating gender, prefer the terns ''masculin'' and ''féminin''. For these terms, do not capitalize or indicate the source of the term in the $2 subfield.  If neither of these terms is appropriate or sufficiently precise, record an appropriate term or phrase preferably using a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or the [https://www.btb.termiumplus.gc.ca/publications/diversite-diversity-eng.html ''Gender and sexual diversity glossary''], recording the source in subfield 2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a for terms other than ''masculin'' and ''féminin''. When terms are not taken from a controlled vocabulary, use the singular form. Use terms rather than ISO 5218 codes.
+
= 336 Content Type =
   −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
'''General'''
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the corresponding subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.
 
  −
''Example:''
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 1# $a Lenoir, Axelle, $d 1979-
  −
375 ## $a Transgenres $2 rvmgd
  −
375 ## $a féminin $s 2018
  −
375 ## $a masculin $s 1979 $t 2018
  −
</pre>
      
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''
 
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''
   −
Codes from the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/gender.html Gender Source Codes] list may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 375 field.
+
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.
   −
'''Subfield $s Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
+
'''Subfield $a Content type term'''
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].
   −
______
+
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''
   −
'''LAC :'''  
+
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].
   −
Do not record gender. ''Exception:'' When information has changed over the course of a person's life. Follow PFAN instructions.
+
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-15)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
Do not delete gender information recorded by other organizations.
+
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =
   −
[2021-03-12]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
'''General'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#375_.E2.80.93_Gender_.28R.29|''Participant's Manual'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 376 Family information =
+
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.
   −
'''General'''
+
''Examples:''
   −
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
vocabulary, use a singular form.
+
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art
   −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm
 +
<br><br>
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
151 ## $a France
   −
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''
+
368 ## $b États $2 ram
 +
<br><br>
   −
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.
+
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)
   −
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period
+
368 ## $b Powiat
 +
<br><br>
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
+
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431
   −
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
+
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd
 +
<br><br>
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br><br>
   −
= 377 Associated language =
+
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites)
   −
'''General'''
+
368 ## $c Rigdonites 
 +
<br><br>
   −
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.
+
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)
   −
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''
+
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm
   −
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]
+
368 ## $c BB-50
 +
</div>
   −
''Examples:''
+
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]].
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
377 ## $a myn
     −
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3
+
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px">
  −
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''</div>
  −
</div>
     −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
''Examples:''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503
   −
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =
+
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503
 +
<br><br>
   −
'''General'''
+
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537
   −
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.
+
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre
 +
<br><br>
   −
''Examples:''
+
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980
  −
378 ## $q John Winston
     −
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965
+
368 ## $d sœur
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns
+
<br><br>
   −
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.
+
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860
378 ## $q Kay Dean
  −
</pre>
     −
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''
+
368 ## $d vicomte
 +
</div>
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 380 Form of work =
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd
   −
'''General'''
+
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' </div>
 +
</div>
   −
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.
+
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
   −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
   −
''Examples:''
+
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein
  −
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf
      +
[2021-03-09]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet
+
= 370 Associated place =
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf
  −
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm
  −
</pre>
  −
 
  −
'''SARs'''
  −
 
  −
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.
  −
 
  −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
  −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
  −
 
  −
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =
      
'''General'''
 
'''General'''
   −
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field.  
+
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.
    
''Examples:''
 
''Examples:''
   
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
 
+
151 ## $a Washington (État)
381 ## $a Fr. 712
   
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''</div> <br>
+
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''</div><br>
   −
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
 +
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf
   −
381 ## $a New American
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
 +
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''</div> <br>
+
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div><br>
   −
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 
+
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf
+
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')</div>
+
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div>
</div>
+
</div><br>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
 +
151 ## $a Québec (Province)
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''</div>
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Authorized access point recorded in 370: </div>
 +
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf
   −
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
 +
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec)
   −
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.
+
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
 
+
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)
''Examples:''
+
</div><br>
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Geographic name in Canadiana : </div>
 +
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''</div>
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
 +
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf
   −
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
+
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''</div><br>
+
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of place)''</div>
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education)  
+
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:</div>
 +
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name for the larger place)''</div>
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
 +
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf
   −
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 
+
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf
+
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''</div>
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''</div>
+
</div> <br>
</div>
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Geographic name in Canadiana :</div>
 +
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''</div>
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
 +
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf
   −
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Form of name as an addition in an access point:</div>
 +
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''</div>
 +
</div><br>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Other place name in Canadiana :</div>
 +
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">
 +
Authorized access point recorded in 370:</div>
 +
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf
 +
</div><br>
 +
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.
   −
''Example:''
+
<span style="color:red>If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.</span>
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)
     −
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf
+
<span style="color:red>''Examples:</span>''
 +
<span style="color:red><div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''</div><br>
   −
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf
+
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''</div>
+
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''</div></div></span><br>
</div>
     −
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).
+
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without
 +
giving a subfield $2.
   −
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX
+
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field.  
+
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.
    
'''Repeatability:'''
 
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
+
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
'''Subfield $u Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
+
'''<span style="color:red>Subfield $c Associated country</span>'''
   −
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.  
+
<span style="color:red>Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.</span>
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
+
''<span style="color:red>Example:</span>''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
<span style="color:red><div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''</div></div><br>
   −
= 382 Medium of performance =
+
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.
   −
'''General'''
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''</div><br>
 +
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''</div><br>
 +
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''</div><br>
 +
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''</span></div></span></div><br>
   −
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from "Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)". Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.
+
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.
   −
'''Repeatability:'''
+
''Example :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf
 +
</div></span>
   −
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.
     −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work =
+
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
   −
'''General'''
+
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
   −
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work.
+
<!--'''SARs'''
   −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
-->
 +
[2022-01-24]<!--(2022-01-22)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 384 Key =
+
= 371 Address =
    
'''General'''
 
'''General'''
   −
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.
+
Best practice:
 +
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).
 +
*
 +
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).
 +
*
 +
* Do not record physical addresses for living people.
 +
*
 +
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.
 +
*
   −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
'''Repeatability'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 385 Audience characteristics =
+
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.
   −
'''General'''
+
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''
   −
PFAN catalogers may use this field but are encouraged to wait until best practice guidelines are developed by the PFAN.
+
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.
   −
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics =
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
   −
'''General'''
+
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
   −
PFAN catalogers may use this field but are encouraged to wait until best practice guidelines are developed by the PFAN.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
   −
[2021-02-21]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
+
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =
+
= 372 Field of activity =
    
'''General'''
 
'''General'''
   −
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).
+
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a
   −
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.
+
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).
   −
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm
 +
</div>
   −
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.
+
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.
   −
Best practice guidelines for RDA:
+
''Example:''
   −
<ul>
+
Authorized access point in Canadiana:
<li>Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
<dl>
+
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament
<dd>&#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;</dd>
+
</div>
<dd>&#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;</dd>
+
Field of activity in 372:
<dd>&#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
+
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf
<div><br> Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.
  −
 
  −
378 ## $q David Walter
  −
</pre>
   
</div>
 
</div>
</dd>
  −
</dl>
  −
</li>
     −
<li>Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
<li>Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall
 +
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
<li>Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm
   −
<li>Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).
+
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale
 
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
<li>If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.
+
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')</div>
<div>
  −
''Examples:''
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<p>100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits<br>
  −
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner<br>
  −
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner</p>
  −
<br>
  −
<p>
  −
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics<br>
  −
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales<br>
  −
''and not''<br>
  −
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales</p>
  −
<br>
  −
<p>
  −
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan<br>
  −
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital<br>
  −
''and not''<br>
  −
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital</p>
   
</div>
 
</div>
</li>
+
</ul>
+
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
   −
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.  
   −
<span id="4XX$w"></span>
+
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v Source of information'''
'''Subfield $w Control subfield'''
     −
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
 +
 
 +
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 373 Associated group =
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.
 +
 
 +
<span style="color:red>If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.</span>
    
''Examples:''
 
''Examples:''
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-<br>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Corporate name in Canadiana:</div>
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-
+
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
+
 
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Authorized access point in 373:</div>
</div><br>
+
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana<br>
  −
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Corporate name in Canadiana:</div>
 +
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">Authorized access point in 373:</div>
 +
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf
 +
</div>
   −
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
''Examples:''
+
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu <br>
  −
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Coded "nne" because the variant is valid in RDA)''
  −
</div><br>
  −
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014<br>
  −
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Coded "nne" because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''
  −
</div> <br>
  −
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.<br>
  −
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
''(Coded "nnea" because the abbreviation "ca." is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''
  −
</div>
  −
</div>
     −
'''SARs'''
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:</div>
 +
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011
   −
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.
+
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014
 +
</div>
   −
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:</div>
 +
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf
   −
[2021-03-10] <!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
</div>
   −
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =
+
<span id="373$s$t"></span>
 +
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
   −
'''General'''
+
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is
 +
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.
   −
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.
+
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
   −
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
   −
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.
+
[2023-06-21]<!--(2023-06-21)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''
+
= 374 Occupation =
 +
'''General'''
   −
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,
+
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,
+
vocabulary, use a singular form.
   −
<div style="margin-left:50px;&quot;">
+
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point
     −
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)
+
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''
</div>
     −
'''NARs'''
+
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.
   −
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and
+
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''
the texts of the relationship designators are different.
     −
'''SARs'''
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =
+
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
'''General'''<br>
+
= 375 Gender =
   −
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
+
'''PFAN'''
   −
''Examples :''
+
<span style="color:red>Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.</span>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)
  −
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra
     −
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men
+
[2023-10-20]<!--(2023-10-20)-->
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
</pre>  
     −
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms].
+
= 376 Family information =
  −
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.
     −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
+
'''General'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =
+
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled
 +
vocabulary, use a singular form.
   −
'''General'''  
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
+
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =
+
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.
   −
'''General'''  
+
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period
   −
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''
 +
 
 +
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
   −
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.
+
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
+
= 377 Associated language =
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =
   
'''General'''
 
'''General'''
   −
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded "r" when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
+
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21. Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
+
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''
   −
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' <big>⮝</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]
   −
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
377 ## $a myn
   −
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).
+
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px">
 +
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''</div>
 +
</div>
   −
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
+
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =
+
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
'''General'''
   −
= 642 Series Numbering Example =
+
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980
   −
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =
+
378 ## $q John Winston
 +
<br><br>
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965
   −
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =
+
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns
 +
<br><br>
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.
   −
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =
+
378 ## $q Kay Dean
 +
</div>
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''
   −
= 646 Series Classification Practice =
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =
+
= 380 Form of work =
==== General ====  
     −
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.
+
'''General'''
   −
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.
+
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.
   −
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
 +
 
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein
   −
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].
+
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf
   −
==== Only two identities ====
     −
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.
  −
  −
==== More than two identities - "basic" authorized access point and references ====
     −
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.
+
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet
   −
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):
+
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of
  −
name]
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):
+
<!--'''SARs'''
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]
+
-->
</div>
+
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-11-01)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.
+
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =
   −
''Examples :''
+
'''General'''
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">"Basic" NAR:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
+
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field.
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991
+
''Examples:''
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991
+
381 ## $a Fr. 712
</div>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''</div> <br>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">NAR for first 500 on "basic" NAR:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991
+
381 ## $a New American
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''</div> <br>
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
+
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais
   −
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991
+
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')</div>
 
</div>
 
</div>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element.  
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">NAR for second 500 on "basic" NAR:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991
+
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.
 +
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001
   −
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991
+
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf
</div>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
<!--</div>-->
+
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''</div><br>
 +
 +
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education)
   −
==== Joint pseudonyms ====
+
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf
   −
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.
+
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''</div>
 +
</div>
   −
''Examples :''
+
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for joint pseudonym:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall
+
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.
+
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf
 
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.
+
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''</div>
 
</div>
 
</div>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall
+
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX
 +
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field.
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark
+
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark
+
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the
</div>
+
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: </div>
     −
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.
+
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.  
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark
+
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-02)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark
+
= 382 Medium of performance =
</div>
  −
</div>
     −
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ====
+
'''General'''
   −
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.
+
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from "Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)". Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.
   −
''Examples :''
+
'''Repeatability:'''
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:</div>
     −
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth
+
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959
+
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-
+
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work =
   −
[…]
+
'''General'''
   −
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]
+
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work.  
</div>
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;"> NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:</div>
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
   −
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959
+
= 384 Key =
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth
+
'''General'''
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth
+
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.
</div>
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
[2021-02-22]<!--(2021-02-19)-->
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: </div>
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-
     −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth
+
= 385 Audience characteristics =
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-
+
'''General'''
   −
[…]
+
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]
+
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')</div>
  −
</div>
  −
<!--</div>-->
     −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
+
''Examples :''
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd
   −
= 667 Nonpublic general note =
+
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt
   −
==== General ====
+
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot
 +
 
 +
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;">
 +
''(Uncontrolled term)''</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
'''Repeatability:'''
   −
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.
+
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
''Examples:''
+
''Examples :''
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].
+
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd
 +
 
 +
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;">
 +
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''</div><br>
   −
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].
+
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française
   −
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.
+
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;">
 +
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''</div><br>
   −
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of
+
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd
undifferentiated name record].
     −
667 ## $a Codée "provisoire" car [reason for coding].
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''or''</div>
   −
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].
+
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd
   −
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].
+
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
  −
(''Used for official language changes'')</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.
+
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''
   −
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====
+
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.
   −
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”
+
[2022-10-14]<!--(2022-10-14)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
''Example:''
+
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics <span style="color:red>[New]</span>=
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.
  −
</div>
     −
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.
+
'''General'''
   −
''Example:''
+
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000
     −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000
+
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].
   −
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000
+
''Examples :''
   −
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy,
+
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants
 +
 
 +
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd
 +
<br><br>
 +
 
 +
130 #0 $a Beowulf
   −
[…]
+
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm
</div>
+
<br><br>
   −
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].
+
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité
   −
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====
+
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd
   −
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.
+
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)
 +
<br><br>
   −
''Example:''
+
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference
     −
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.
+
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre
</div>
     −
==== NARs and subject usage ====
+
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre ("poetry, prose, drama, maps & comics")
 +
<br><br>
   −
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.
+
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés
  −
<div style="margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;">1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:</div>
     −
<ol>
+
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens
<li type="a">'''Heads of state, etc.'''<br>
     −
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:
+
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)<br>
+
(Uncontrolled demographic term)
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.
+
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works
 +
 
 +
''Example :''
   −
''Examples:''
   
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
008/11 = n
     −
008/15 = b
+
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5
   −
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)
+
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd<br>
 +
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
'''Repeatability:'''
 +
 
 +
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:
 +
 +
If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.
   −
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.
+
''Examples :''
</div>
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
008/11 = n
     −
008/15 = b
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)
+
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers
   −
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.
+
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm
</div>
     −
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.
+
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd<br>
</li>
+
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)
 +
<br><br>
   −
<li type="a">'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''<br>
+
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah
   −
The "politique d'indexation du RVM" is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long
+
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see "Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval", 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).<br>
  −
  −
''Examples:''
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
008/11 = n
     −
008/15 = b
+
ou
   −
151 ## $a Ceylan
+
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd
   −
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.
+
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd
</div>
+
<br><br>
</li>
     −
<li type="a">'''NARs for families'''<br>
+
130 #0 $a Faux pas
   −
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 10.0, when creating an NAR
+
386 ## $a Gatinois
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:
+
 
+
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
 
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.
+
ou
</div>
  −
</li>
     −
<li type="a">'''NARs for fictitious characters'''<br>
+
386 ## $a Gatinois
   −
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR
+
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.</div>
  −
</li>
  −
</ol>
     −
<div style="margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;">2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):</div>
+
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)<br>
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.
+
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)
 
</div>
 
</div>
  −
''Examples:''
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)
     −
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.
+
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''
</div>
     −
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====
+
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.
   −
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.
+
''Example :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
''Example:''
+
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
008/29 = b
     −
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-
+
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd
 +
<br><br>
   −
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-
+
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)
   −
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-
+
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd
   −
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.
+
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre ("classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999")
 
</div>
 
</div>
   −
==== Duplicates ====
+
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.
 +
 
 +
''Example :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:
+
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd
   −
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep ([date])].
+
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd
    +
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)<br>
 +
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)
 
</div>
 
</div>
[2021-03-23] <!--(2021-03-05)-->
  −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
     −
= 670 Sources found =
+
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.
   −
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
''Example :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
   −
=== Introduction===
+
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)
   −
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name
+
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,
  −
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.
     −
<ol>'''Functions of the 670 field:'''
+
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements
  −
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later
  −
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)
  −
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms
  −
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names)
  −
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title
  −
* To record research required by the current guidelines
  −
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions
  −
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670
  −
</ol>
     −
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to
+
ou
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field.
     −
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.
+
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd
   −
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author’s blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.
+
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd
   −
<ol>'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''
+
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.
  −
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.
  −
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.
  −
</ol>
     −
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect.
+
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd<br>
 +
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)
   −
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.
+
</div>
 +
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''
   −
=== Format of 670 fields ===
+
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.
  −
'''General'''
     −
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).
     −
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.
+
[2023-09-11]<!--(2023-11-09)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   −
''Example:''
+
= 388 Time Period of Creation =
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; "[love]" est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)
  −
</pre>
     −
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed
+
'''General'''
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When
  −
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.
     −
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).
+
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.
   −
''Example:''
+
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a.
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
''Examples:''
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
</pre>
+
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm
   −
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and
+
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.
     −
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''
+
388 1# $a <span style="color:red>Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast</span>
   −
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:
+
</div>
   −
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator’s name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.
+
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).
   −
# The date of publication.
+
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm
 +
</div>
   −
<ol>''Examples:''
+
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])
     −
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b $b page de titre ([data])
+
''Examples:''
</pre>
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
</ol>
+
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm
   −
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:
+
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm
   −
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.
+
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.
   −
<ol>
+
''Example:''
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data])
+
046 ## $k 13
not
  −
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])
     −
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data])
+
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm
not
  −
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])
  −
</pre>
  −
</ol>
     −
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
<ol>
+
''</div>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
</div>
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)
+
'''Repeatability:'''
</pre>
  −
</ol>
     −
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''
+
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity
   −
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:
+
''Examples :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm
   −
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations may be used (e.g., t.p., v. 6).
+
388 1# $a <span style="color:red>Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast</span>
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information.
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
<ol>
+
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''</div>
''Examples:''
+
</div>
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)
     −
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)
+
[2022-11-07] <!--(2022-11-04)-->
   −
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)
+
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
</pre>
  −
</ol>
     −
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:
+
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =
* '''CIP.''' [information coming soon]
     −
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).
+
'''General'''
<ol>
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019: $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)
  −
</pre>
  −
</ol>
  −
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''
  −
<ol>
  −
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
[Exemples à venir]
  −
</pre>
  −
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) p. 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)
  −
</pre>
  −
'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.
  −
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.
  −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
  −
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)
  −
</pre>
  −
</ol>
     −
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''
+
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).
   −
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
+
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.
   −
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity
+
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u.
     −
''Example:''
+
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; BODC, is a national facility for looking after and distributing data concerning the marine environment) $u [http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/ http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/]
  −
</div>
     −
=== Recording names and titles ===
+
Best practice guidelines for RDA:
   −
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.
+
<ul>
 +
<li>Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:
 +
<dl>
 +
<dd>&#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;</dd>
 +
<dd>&#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;</dd>
 +
<dd>&#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.
   −
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term
+
<div><br> Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:
“citation title” and its exact location.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.
   −
''Example:''
+
378 ## $q David Walter
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)
   
</div>
 
</div>
  −
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body’s name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.
  −
  −
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in
  −
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.
  −
  −
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the
  −
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.
  −
  −
''Example:''
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)
   
</div>
 
</div>
 +
</dd>
 +
</dl>
 +
</li>
   −
=== Recording dates ===
+
<li>Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).
   −
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.
+
<li>Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.
   −
=== Justifying variant access points ===
+
<li>Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.
   −
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:
+
<li>Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).
   −
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;
+
<li>If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;
+
<div>
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.
+
''Examples:''
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
+
<p>100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits<br>
=== Justifying other elements ===
+
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner<br>
 +
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner</p>
 +
<br>
 +
<p>
 +
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics<br>
 +
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales<br>
 +
<span style="font-family:sans-serif"><em>and not</em></span><br>
 +
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales</p>
 +
<br>
 +
<p>
 +
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan<br>
 +
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital<br>
 +
<span style="font-family:sans-serif"><em>and not</em></span><br>
 +
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital</p>
 +
</div>
 +
</li>
 +
</ul>
   −
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can
+
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.
     −
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines
+
<span id="4XX$w"></span>
on subfield $u and subfield $v.
+
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''
   −
=== Recording other data ===
+
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.
   −
'''NARs''' <br>
+
''Examples:''
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
+
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-<br>
 
+
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-
'''SARs''' <br>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.
+
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''
 +
</div><br>
 +
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana<br>
 +
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<span style="color:red>When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.</span>
   −
=== Special types of citations ===
+
<span style="color:red>''Example :''</span>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<span style="color:red>100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023<br>
 +
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-</span>
 +
</div></span>
   −
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.
+
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).
   −
'''Canadiana'''
+
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.
   −
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:
+
''Examples:''
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])
+
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu <br>
 +
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Coded "nne" because the variant is valid in RDA)''
 +
</div><br>
 +
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014<br>
 +
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Coded "nne" because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''
 +
</div> <br>
 +
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.<br>
 +
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(Coded "nnea" because the abbreviation "ca." is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''
 +
</div>
 +
</div>
   −
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])
+
<span style="color:red>When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.</span>
</pre>
     −
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''
+
<!--'''SARs'''
   −
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:
+
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
<div style="font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;">
  −
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])<span id="^1"></span>[[#LC/NAF|<sup>[1]</sup>]]
  −
<p>670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])</p>
  −
<p>670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])</p>
  −
</div>
     −
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''
+
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.
   −
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''<span id="^2"></span>[[#Usage|<sup>[2]</sup>]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''<span id="^3"></span>[[#Forme_non_transcrite|<sup>[3]</sup>]].
+
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.
 +
-->
 +
[2024-03-27] <!--(2024-03-27)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' <big></big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' <big></big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' <big></big>]]
   −
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.
+
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
'''General'''
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)
  −
</div>
  −
</div>
     −
''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.
+
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.
   −
<hr />
+
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
<span id="LC/NAF"></span><small>1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.</small>
  −
<br>
  −
<span id="Usage"></span><small>2. [[#^2|^]] "Usage" for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.</small>
  −
<br>
  −
<span id="Forme_non_transcrite"></span><small>3. [[#^3|^]] «&nbsp;Forme non transcrite&nbsp;» (or «&nbsp;formes non transcrites&nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher’s name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..</small>
  −
<br><br>
     −
'''Citing other files or catalogs.'''
+
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.
   −
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:
+
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''
   −
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])
+
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])
+
 
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])
+
<div style="margin-left:50px;&quot;">
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])
+
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])
  −
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])
  −
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])
  −
</pre>
     −
'''Geographical Names Database'''
+
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point
   −
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. If possible, use the degree sign (not
+
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information
superscript zero) to show degrees, use the modifier letter prime for minutes and the modifer letter double prime for seconds.
     −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 12 avril 2014 $b (Bellinzona [forme approuvée]; PPLA à Ticino, Suisse, 46°11ʹ43ʺN, 009°01ʹ22ʺE; il existe aussi un district du même nom à Ticino)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 4 mai 2016 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22°53ʹ01ʺN 121°02ʹ54ʺE; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)
  −
</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''
+
'''NARs'''
   −
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.
+
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and
 +
the texts of the relationship designators are different.
 +
 
 +
<!--'''SARs'''
 +
 
 +
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
 +
-->
 +
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-11-01)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =
 +
 
 +
'''General'''<br>
 +
 
 +
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
 +
 
 +
''Examples :''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra
 +
<br><br>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms].
 +
 +
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.
 +
 
 +
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =
 +
 
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.
 +
 
 +
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =
 +
 
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.
 +
 
 +
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.
 +
 
 +
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded "r" when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.
 +
 
 +
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
 +
 
 +
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' <big>⮝</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =
 +
 
 +
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).
 +
 
 +
[2021-02-15]<!--(2021-02-10)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 642 Series Numbering Example =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 646 Series Classification Practice =
 +
 
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =
 +
==== General ====
 +
 
 +
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.
 +
 
 +
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.
 +
 
 +
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.
 +
 
 +
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.
 +
 
 +
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].
 +
 
 +
==== Only two identities ====
 +
 
 +
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.
 +
 +
==== More than two identities - "basic" authorized access point and references ====
 +
 
 +
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.
 +
 
 +
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of
 +
name]
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.
 +
 
 +
''Examples :''
 +
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">"Basic" NAR:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">NAR for first 500 on "basic" NAR:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif">NAR for second 500 on "basic" NAR:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991
 +
</div>
 +
<!--</div>-->
 +
 
 +
==== Joint pseudonyms ====
 +
 
 +
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.
 +
 
 +
''Examples :''
 +
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for joint pseudonym:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: </div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ====
 +
 
 +
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.
 +
 
 +
''Examples :''
 +
<!--<div style="padding-left:50px;">-->
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-
 +
 
 +
[…]
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;"> NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:</div>
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: </div>
 +
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-
 +
 
 +
[…]
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')</div>
 +
</div>
 +
<!--</div>-->
 +
 
 +
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-04)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 667 Nonpublic general note =
 +
 
 +
==== General ====
 +
 
 +
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.
 +
 
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''</div>
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Codée "provisoire" car [reason for coding].
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;">
 +
(''Used for official language changes'')</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.
 +
 
 +
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====
 +
 
 +
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000
 +
 
 +
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000
 +
 
 +
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy,
 +
 
 +
[…]
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].
 +
 
 +
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====
 +
 
 +
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
==== NARs and subject usage ====
 +
 
 +
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.
 +
 +
<div style="margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;">1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:</div>
 +
 
 +
<ol>
 +
<li type="a">'''Heads of state, etc.'''<br>
 +
 
 +
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:
 +
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.
 +
 
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
008/11 = n
 +
 
 +
008/15 = b
 +
 
 +
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.
 +
</div>
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
008/11 = n
 +
 
 +
008/15 = b
 +
 
 +
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.
 +
</li>
 +
 
 +
<li type="a">'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''<br>
 +
 
 +
The "politique d'indexation du RVM" is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long
 +
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see "Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval", 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).<br>
 +
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
008/11 = n
 +
 
 +
008/15 = b
 +
 
 +
151 ## $a Ceylan
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.
 +
</div>
 +
</li>
 +
 
 +
<li type="a">'''NARs for families'''<br>
 +
 
 +
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 10.0, when creating an NAR
 +
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:
 +
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.
 +
</div>
 +
</li>
 +
 
 +
<li type="a">'''NARs for fictitious characters'''<br>
 +
 
 +
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR
 +
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.</div>
 +
</li>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
<div style="margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;">2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):</div>
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.
 +
</div>
 +
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====
 +
 
 +
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
008/29 = b
 +
 
 +
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-
 +
 
 +
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-
 +
 
 +
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
==== Duplicates ====
 +
 
 +
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
 
 +
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep<span style="color:red>]</span> ([date]).
 +
 
 +
</div>
 +
[2022-11-10] <!--(2021-03-25)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 670 Sources found =
 +
 
 +
<!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
 +
-->
 +
=== Introduction===
 +
 
 +
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name
 +
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,
 +
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.
 +
 
 +
<ol>'''Functions of the 670 field:'''
 +
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements
 +
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later
 +
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)
 +
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms
 +
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names)
 +
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title
 +
* To record research required by the current guidelines
 +
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions
 +
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to
 +
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field.
 +
 
 +
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.
 +
 
 +
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.
 +
 
 +
<ol>'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''
 +
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.
 +
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.
 +
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect.
 +
 
 +
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.
 +
 
 +
=== Format of 670 fields ===
 +
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).
 +
 
 +
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; "[love]" est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed
 +
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When
 +
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.
 +
 
 +
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and
 +
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''
 +
 
 +
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:
 +
 
 +
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.
 +
 
 +
# The date of publication.
 +
 
 +
<ol>''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])
 +
</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:
 +
 
 +
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.
 +
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.
 +
 
 +
<ol>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data])
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
<span style="font-family:sans-serif"><em>not</em></span><br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])
 +
<br><br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data])
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
<span style="font-family:sans-serif"><em>not</em></span><br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])
 +
</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).
 +
<ol>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)
 +
</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''
 +
 
 +
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:
 +
 
 +
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations may be used (e.g., t.p., v. 6).
 +
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information.
 +
<ol>
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)
 +
</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:
 +
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include "CIP" in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).
 +
<ol>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019 : $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).
 +
<ol>
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;">
 +
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)</div>
 +
 
 +
</div>
 +
</ol>
 +
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''
 +
<ol>
 +
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;">
 +
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;">
 +
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)</div>
 +
 
 +
</div>
 +
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) p. 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)
 +
</div>
 +
<!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.
 +
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)-->
 +
 
 +
</ol>
 +
 
 +
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''
 +
 
 +
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.
 +
 
 +
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity
 +
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. <span style="color:red>The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).</span>
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
=== Recording names and titles ===
 +
 
 +
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.
 +
 
 +
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term
 +
“citation title” and its exact location.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.
 +
 
 +
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in
 +
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.
 +
 
 +
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the
 +
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.
 +
 
 +
''Example:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
=== Recording dates ===
 +
 
 +
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.
 +
 
 +
=== Justifying variant access points ===
 +
 
 +
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:
 +
 
 +
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;
 +
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;
 +
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.
 +
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.
 +
 
 +
=== Justifying other elements ===
 +
 
 +
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can
 +
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.
 +
 
 +
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines
 +
on subfield $u and subfield $v.
 +
 
 +
=== Recording other data ===
 +
 
 +
'''NARs''' <br>
 +
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.
 +
 
 +
<!--'''SARs''' <br>
 +
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.
 +
-->
 +
=== Special types of citations ===
 +
 
 +
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.
 +
 
 +
'''Canadiana'''
 +
 
 +
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])
 +
<br>
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''
 +
 
 +
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:
 +
<div style="font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;">
 +
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])<span id="^1"></span>[[#LC/NAF|<sup>[1]</sup>]]
 +
<p>670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])</p>
 +
<p>670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])</p>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''
 +
 
 +
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''<span id="^2"></span>[[#Usage|<sup>[2]</sup>]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''<span id="^3"></span>[[#Forme_non_transcrite|<sup>[3]</sup>]].
 +
 
 +
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)
 +
</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.-->
 +
 
 +
<hr />
 +
<span id="LC/NAF"></span><small>1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.</small>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Usage"></span><small>2. [[#^2|^]] "Usage" for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.</small>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Forme_non_transcrite"></span><small>3. [[#^3|^]] «&nbsp;Forme non transcrite&nbsp;» (or «&nbsp;formes non transcrites&nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..</small>
 +
<br><br>
 +
 
 +
'''Citing other files or catalogs.'''
 +
 
 +
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])
 +
 
 +
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
'''Geographical Names Database'''
 +
 
 +
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. If possible, use the degree sign (not
 +
superscript zero) to show degrees, use the modifier letter prime for minutes and the modifer letter double prime for seconds.
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 12 avril 2014 $b (Bellinzona [forme approuvée]; PPLA à Ticino, Suisse, 46°11ʹ43ʺN, 009°01ʹ22ʺE; il existe aussi un district du même nom à Ticino)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 4 mai 2016 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22°53ʹ01ʺN 121°02ʹ54ʺE; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)
 +
</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''
 +
 
 +
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)
 +
</div>
 +
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
 +
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)
 +
</div>
 +
</div>
 +
 
 +
<!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''
 +
 
 +
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)
 +
 
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)
 +
</div>
 +
-->
 +
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''
 +
 
 +
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].
 +
 
 +
[2023-09-11]<!--(2023-09-11)-->
 +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 +
 
 +
= 672 Title related to the entity =
 +
'''General'''
 +
 
 +
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record.
 +
 
 +
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.
 +
 
 +
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.
 +
 
 +
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.
 +
 
 +
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.
 +
 
 +
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.
 +
 
 +
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-<br>
 +
672 #3 $a La consolation<br>
 +
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 fields with titles proper)''</div>
 +
 
 +
<br>
 +
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric
 +
672 #0 $a Cervantes
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with title proper)''</div>
 +
 
 +
<br>
 +
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)
 +
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with preferred title)''</div>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
<br>
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
+
151 ## $a Espagne
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)
+
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries
</div>
+
<br>
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''</div>
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)
  −
</div>
  −
<div style="text-indent:-85px;">
  −
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)
  −
</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
'''Citations for republication SARs.'''
+
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''
 +
 
 +
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.
   −
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)
+
''Examples:''
 +
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 +
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''</div>
   −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
<br>
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)
+
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars
 +
<br>
 +
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''</div>
 
</div>
 
</div>
   −
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''
+
'''Subfield $f – Date'''
   −
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].
+
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.
 
  −
[2021-03-17]<!--(2021-03-06)-->
  −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
  −
 
  −
= 672 Title related to the entity =
  −
'''General'''
  −
 
  −
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record.  
  −
 
  −
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.
  −
 
  −
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.
  −
 
  −
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.
  −
 
  −
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.
  −
 
  −
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.
      
''Examples:''
 
''Examples:''
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-<br>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for work:</div>
672 #3 $a La consolation<br>
+
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs
   
<br>
 
<br>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 fields with titles proper)''</div>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of  work)''</div>
    
<br>
 
<br>
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for expression:</div>
672 #0 $a Cervantes
+
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987
 
<br>
 
<br>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with title proper)''</div>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''</div>
    
<br>
 
<br>
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for manifestation:</div>
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia
+
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005
 
<br>
 
<br>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with preferred title)''</div>
+
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''</div>
 
  −
<br>
  −
151 ## $a Espagne
  −
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''</div>
   
</div>
 
</div>
   −
'''Subfield $b Remainder of title'''
+
'''Subfield $w Bibliographic record control number'''
   −
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.
+
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.
   −
''Examples:''
+
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''</div>
     −
<br>
+
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''</div>
  −
</div>
     −
'''Subfield $f – Date'''
+
''Example:''
   −
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.
+
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]
 
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
''Examples:''
+
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
+
</div>
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for work:</div>
+
[2020-12-14]<!--(2020-11-26)-->
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of  work)''</div>
  −
 
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for expression:</div>
  −
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''</div>
  −
 
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">672 for manifestation:</div>
  −
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005
  −
<br>
  −
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''</div>
  −
</div>
  −
 
  −
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''
  −
 
  −
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.
  −
 
  −
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.
  −
 
  −
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.
  −
 
  −
''Example:''
  −
 
  −
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]
  −
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
  −
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE
  −
</div>
  −
[2020-12-14]<!--(2020-11-26)-->
  −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
      
= 673 Title not related to the entity =
 
= 673 Title not related to the entity =
Line 2,475: Line 3,255:  
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]
 
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-
+
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-  
672 #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977
+
 
 +
67<span style="color:red">3</span> #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977
 
<br>
 
<br>
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''</div>
 
<div style="font-family:sans-serif;">''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''</div>
Line 2,492: Line 3,273:  
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)
 
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)
 +
 
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860
 
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860
 
<br>
 
<br>
Line 2,501: Line 3,283:     
= 675 Sources not found =
 
= 675 Sources not found =
''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.
+
<!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.-->
    
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.
 
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.
Line 2,508: Line 3,290:     
''Example:''
 
''Example:''
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996
 
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996
 +
 
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014
 
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014
</pre>
+
</div>
    
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.
 
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.
   −
[2021-03-10]<!--(2021-03-03)-->
+
[2021-11-03]<!--(2021-11-01)-->
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
 
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' <big>⮞</big>]]
   Line 2,526: Line 3,309:  
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.
 
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.
</pre>
+
</div>
    
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.
 
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.
</div>
      
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :
 
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :
Line 2,593: Line 3,375:     
''Example:''
 
''Example:''
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
100 1# $a Dion, Céline
 
100 1# $a Dion, Céline
 +
 
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212
 
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212
</pre>
+
</div>
    
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value "0".
 
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value "0".
Line 2,607: Line 3,390:     
''Examples :''
 
''Examples :''
<pre style="font-family:courier new;">
+
<div style="font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;">
 
151 ## $a France
 
151 ## $a France
 +
 
781 #6 $z France
 
781 #6 $z France
 +
<br><br>
    
151 ## $a Paris (France)
 
151 ## $a Paris (France)
 +
 
781 #6 $z France $z Paris
 
781 #6 $z France $z Paris
 +
<br><br>
    
151 ## $a Lycie
 
151 ## $a Lycie
 +
 
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie
 
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie
 +
<br><br>
    
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)
 
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)
 +
 
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)
 
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)
 +
<br><br>
    
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)
 
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)
 +
 
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)
 
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)
</pre>
+
</div>
    
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.
 
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.
Line 2,635: Line 3,427:  
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =
 
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =
   −
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]] &nbsp;|&nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' <big></big>]]
+
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]]  
 +
 
 +
= Appendix 2: Special projects =
 +
 
 +
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies.
 +
 
 +
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.
 +
 
 +
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===
 +
<ol>
 +
'''A) General information'''<br>
 +
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.<br>
 +
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: <br>
 +
* In the Leader/17, the value was "o" (Incomplete authority record).
 +
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).<br>
 +
<br>
 +
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''<br>
 +
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.
 +
When cataloguers update these records, they should:
 +
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to "n" (full record);
 +
* Delete field 667 "NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)"; 
 +
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).
 +
</ol>
    +
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===
 +
<ol>
 +
'''A) General Information'''<br>
 +
This mentoring project <span style="color:red>that, as of February,</span> allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by <span style="color:red>mentored libraries</span> are revised by library technicians <span style="color:red>at the mentoring university.</span> <br>
 +
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: <br>
 +
* In the Leader/17, the value was "o" (Incomplete authority record).
 +
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR<span style="color:red>, etc.</span>]). <br>
 +
<br>
 +
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' <br>
 +
These records should not be modified.<br>
 +
</ol>
 +
[2022-07-15] <!--(2022-07-15)-->
    +
<br>[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' <big>&#11165;</big>]]
 
<br>
 
<br>
    
[[Category:PFAN]]
 
[[Category:PFAN]]